1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1441–1480 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Charcoal steel building retail storefront with large display windows on a gravel lot

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,750

12

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,000$8,750SAVE $1,250
or $182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×26 as a dedicated stock room separate.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,750$10,000Save $1,250
or as low as $182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,750
18×28
longer
$9,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 small business inventory storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×26 small business inventory storage? At 468 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×26 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 468 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 18×26 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×26 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $182/month on a 18×26 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×26 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building retail storefront with large display windows on a gravel lot

18×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,750

12

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,000$8,750SAVE $1,250
or $182/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×26 as a.

You’re viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,750$10,000Save $1,250
or as low as $182/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,750
18×28
longer
$9,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Theft-Resistant
  • Keypad Entry
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage layout.

Our 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×26 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit. The 12-gauge frame upgrade plus locking walk-in door and roll-up combo gives you fast load-in and theft resistance. Stamped drawings keep you compliant with county code.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor job-site tool and material storage
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$182/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $182/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?

A 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $182/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $182/month on a 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal barn with open equipment bay and black wainscot in fall countryside

18×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Homeowners with pools convert the 18×26 into a.

You’re viewing:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Pool House Layout
  • Partial Enclosure
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-POOL-HOUSE-OUTDOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft ADU

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building layout.

Our 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Homeowners with pools convert the 18×26 into a finished pool house with changing area, bathroom rough-in, and covered lounge. Wainscoting in a contrasting color gives it residential curb appeal. The 28′ length lets you split it into a 10′ enclosed room plus an 18′ covered patio.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
Everyday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house and outdoor entertainment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
pool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building cost?

A 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house and outdoor entertainment building to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure pool cabana with teal trim and french doors among tropical palms

18×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal workshop with monitor roof, cream roll-up door and backyard garden beds

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo | Steel and Stud, From $6,900

12

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,850$6,900SAVE $950
or $144/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners pick the 18×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,900$7,850Save $950
or as low as $144/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$6,900
18×28
longer
$7,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylight Panels
  • French Doors
  • Gardener Pick
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-GARDEN-SHED-GREEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft shop

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo layout.

Our 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo fits 18-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners pick the 18×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into a 18×26 enclosed potting and tool shed plus a 18×26 covered greenhouse zone with skylights. Add a French door between the spaces. R-13 insulation in the enclosed half keeps seedlings stable through shoulder seasons.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed and greenhouse combo
Everyday garden shed and greenhouse combo
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed and greenhouse combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
garden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$144/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $144/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏛️ 18×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo cost?

A 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo from Steel and Stud starts at $6,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $144/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $144/month on a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo typically adds $3,744–$5,616 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal workshop with monitor roof, cream roll-up door and backyard garden beds

18×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sanctuary interior of a prefab metal building with timber trusses, wood pews, and cross

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,850

12

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,100$8,850SAVE $1,250
or $184/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×26Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 18×26 to store folding chairs, tables, AV gear, and seasonal decorations. The.

You’re viewing:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage·Size18×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,850$10,100Save $1,250
or as low as $184/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×26
18×26
this size
$8,850
18×28
longer
$9,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 468 sq ft enclosed
  • 140 MPH Rating
  • Code-Certified
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X26-CHURCH-NONPROFITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

18 feet wide × 26 feet long. 18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 26′ · 468 sq ft

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage layout.

18×26 delivers 468 sq ft of public-use church, nonprofit, or community storage space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 18×26 to store folding chairs, tables, AV gear, and seasonal decorations. The 12-gauge frame upgrade and 140 MPH wind rating handle exposed rural sites. A single roll-up door plus walk-in keeps daily access simple.

💡 Pro tip:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage works well at 18×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
468 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space468 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday church, nonprofit, or community storage
Everyday church, nonprofit, or community storage
468 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church, nonprofit, or community storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
church, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, what makes it different.

468sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$184/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $184/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×26?

468 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 26′ footprint with 468 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $3,744–$5,616 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,106+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage cost?

A 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $184/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Almost always for 468+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $184/month on a 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sanctuary interior of a prefab metal building with timber trusses, wood pews, and cross

18×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

468 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×26 steel building delivers 468 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×125 Distribution Warehouse

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 distribution warehouse.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Distribution Warehouse layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of code-compliant distribution warehouse space. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically. Add three dock-high roll-ups on the long wall for staged loading.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Warehouse works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×125 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

100×125 Distribution Warehouse

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×125 Manufacturing Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $231,050

12

100×125 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,400$231,050SAVE $32,350
or $4814/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×125 to.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,050$263,400Save $32,350
or as low as $4814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×125
this size
$231,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Crane-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 manufacturing facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Manufacturing Facility layout.

Our 100×125 manufacturing facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×125 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof. The clear-span design means no interior columns interrupting overhead crane runways. Spec 12-gauge framing and 26-gauge walls for the heavier internal loads.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×125 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $231,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4814/month on a 100×125 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×125 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

100×125 Manufacturing Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black trim, windowed roll-up door and lit walk doors at sunset

100×125 Commercial Workshop

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×125.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

Our 100×125 commercial workshop fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×125 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a proven layout for leasing to auto repair, welding, woodworking, and small fab shops. Pre-frame the partitions in the 3D builder so you can drop steel-stud walls later.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×125 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Caramel metal workshop with black trim, windowed roll-up door and lit walk doors at sunset

100×125 Commercial Workshop

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with open side bays holding a tractor, horse trailer and hay

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $229,450

12

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$261,550$229,450SAVE $32,100
or $4780/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Equipment & Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines, sprayers, and 1,000+ round bales in one structure. The 100-foot width clears two.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$229,450$261,550Save $32,100
or as low as $4780/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$229,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 equipment & hay barn.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Barn layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space. Agricultural-industrial operators use this size to shelter combines, sprayers, and 1,000+ round bales in one structure. The 100-foot width clears two equipment lanes back-to-back, and an open gable end on the short wall lets you drive straight through. Add a 100×125 lean-to for tractors.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Barn works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4780/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4780/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×125 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $229,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4780/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4780/month on a 100×125 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building with open side bays holding a tractor, horse trailer and hay

100×125 Equipment & Hay Barn

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×125 Aircraft Hangar

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24′ Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 125′ · 12,500 ground + loft

Aircraft Hangar layout.

Our 100×125 aircraft hangar fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation wingspan, and a hydraulic bifold door across the gable end gives you full clearance. Engineering for FAA wind exposure and tail clearance is built into the stamped drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Aircraft Hangar works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×125 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

100×125 Aircraft Hangar

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×125 Cold Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $231,050

12

100×125 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,400$231,050SAVE $32,350
or $4814/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Cold Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,050$263,400Save $32,350
or as low as $4814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$231,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 cold storage facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×125 cold storage facility? At 12500 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage. The 12,12500 sq ft floor splits into a 36°F cooler and a -10°F freezer with a shared loading vestibule. R-30+ panels and vapor-sealed seams are configured during the customize step.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Cold Storage Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×125 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $231,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 cold storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4814/month on a 100×125 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×125 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×125 Cold Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $228,800

12

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$260,850$228,800SAVE $32,050
or $4767/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena, built for hobby and recreational use.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space. Equestrian operators choose 100×125 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits with safe wall clearance trimmed) or a barrel-racing pattern. The.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$228,800$260,850Save $32,050
or as low as $4767/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×120
smaller
$219,650
100×125
this size
$228,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Clear Span
  • Kick-Wall Wainscot
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 indoor riding arena.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. 100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 125′ · 12,500 ground + loft

Indoor Riding Arena layout.

100×125 delivers 12500 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor riding arena space. Equestrian operators choose 100×125 for a full dressage court (66’x132′ fits with safe wall clearance trimmed) or a barrel-racing pattern. The clear-span eliminates interior posts that spook horses, and 16-foot eaves give you working clearance for a mounted rider plus roof framing.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4767/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4767/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×125 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $228,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4767/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4767/month on a 100×125 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×125 indoor riding arena for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor riding arena to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$228,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

100×125 Indoor Riding Arena

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$228,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

100×125 Retail & Showroom

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Retail & Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to.

You’re viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 retail & showroom.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Retail & Showroom layout.

Our 100×125 retail & showroom fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×125 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Retail & Showroom works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Retail & Showroom, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×125 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 retail & showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building shop with glass gable storefront glowing at golden hour as shoppers enter

100×125 Retail & Showroom

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building with open bays storing a Class A motorhome and bowrider boat

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud, From $231,050

12

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,400$231,050SAVE $32,350
or $4814/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Truck & Fleet Service Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×125 truck & fleet service center fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Fleet operators spec 100×125 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with.

You’re viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$231,050$263,400Save $32,350
or as low as $4814/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$231,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 truck & fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 truck & fleet service center fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Truck & Fleet Service Center layout.

Our 100×125 truck & fleet service center fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Fleet operators spec 100×125 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec 100×125 roll-ups on both long walls for true drive-through service.

💡 Pro tip:Truck & Fleet Service Center works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4814/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4814/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×125 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $231,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4814/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4814/month on a 100×125 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×125 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building with open bays storing a Class A motorhome and bowrider boat

100×125 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$231,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud, From $230,750

12

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$263,050$230,750SAVE $32,300
or $4807/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Sports & Recreation Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 100×125 sports & recreation facility packs 12500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting.

You’re viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,750$263,050Save $32,300
or as low as $4807/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 sports & recreation facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 100×125 sports & recreation facility packs 12500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Sports & Recreation Facility layout.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 100×125 sports & recreation facility packs 12500 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,12500 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area. 24-foot eaves clear lobbed shots and ceiling lighting.

💡 Pro tip:Sports & Recreation Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4807/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4807/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×125 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $230,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4807/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4807/month on a 100×125 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

100×125 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with green roof and open front bays as a lakeside loafing shelter

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud, From $229,450

12

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$261,550$229,450SAVE $32,100
or $4780/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Livestock & Dairy Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×125 livestock & dairy building fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×125 to house 80-120 head.

You’re viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$229,450$261,550Save $32,100
or as low as $4780/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$229,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 livestock & dairy building.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 livestock & dairy building fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft

Livestock & Dairy Building layout.

Our 100×125 livestock & dairy building fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×125 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec’d in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock & Dairy Building works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4780/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4780/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🏢 100×125

Self-Storage Facility

100×125 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×125 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $229,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4780/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4780/month on a 100×125 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×125 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with green roof and open front bays as a lakeside loafing shelter

100×125 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$229,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior self storage corridor with orange roll-up doors and bright lights

100×125 Self-Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×125 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $230,650

12

100×125 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$262,950$230,650SAVE $32,300
or $4805/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×125Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×125 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×125 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×125·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$230,650$262,950Save $32,300
or as low as $4805/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×125
100×125
this size
$230,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X125-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×125 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 125 feet long. Our 100×125 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 125′ · 12,500 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

Our 100×125 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 125-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix. Lower eaves keep the heated/cooled volume manageable for HVAC.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×125, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×125 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×125 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length125′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
12,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×125 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

12,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4805/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×125 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4805/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×125?

12,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 125′ footprint with 12,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $100,000–$150,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×125 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×125 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×125 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×125 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×126×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$56,250+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×125

Distribution Warehouse

100×125 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×125

Manufacturing Facility

100×125 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×125

Commercial Workshop

100×125 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×125

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×125 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×125

Aircraft Hangar

100×125 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×125

Cold Storage Facility

100×125 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🎯 100×125

Indoor Riding Arena

100×125 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$228,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×125

Retail & Showroom

100×125 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×125

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×125 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$231,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×125

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×125 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$230,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×125

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×125 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$229,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×125 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×125 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $230,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4805/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×125 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×125 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 12,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×125 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×125 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×125 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4805/month on a 100×125 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×125 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×125 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×125 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior self storage corridor with orange roll-up doors and bright lights

100×125 Self-Storage Facility

12,500 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 125′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×125 steel building delivers 12,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$230,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×50 Commercial Warehouse

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Commercial Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $93,350

12

100×50 Commercial Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,400$93,350SAVE $13,050
or $1945/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Commercial Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Commercial Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×50 commercial warehouse? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Distribution and contractor buyers pick the 100×50 footprint for warehouse space that fits.

You’re viewing:Commercial Warehouse·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,350$106,400Save $13,050
or as low as $1945/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-COMMERCIAL-WAREHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 commercial warehouse.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 100×50 commercial warehouse? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Commercial Warehouse layout.

Looking for a 100×50 commercial warehouse? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Distribution and contractor buyers pick the 100×50 footprint for warehouse space that fits pallet racking down both long walls with a 14-foot center aisle for forklifts. Two 100×50 roll-up doors on a short wall let semi-trailers back in. Ceilings at 16-20 feet allow three-tier racking.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Warehouse works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Commercial Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial warehouse
Everyday commercial warehouse
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial warehouse + seasonal storage
commercial warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Commercial Warehouse, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1945/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 commercial warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1945/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Commercial Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Commercial Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Warehouse also viewed:

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 commercial warehouse cost?

A 100×50 commercial warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $93,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1945/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 commercial warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 commercial warehouse?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 commercial warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 commercial warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 commercial warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1945/month on a 100×50 commercial warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 commercial warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 commercial warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×50 commercial warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

100×50 Commercial Warehouse

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $92,150

12

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$105,050$92,150SAVE $12,900
or $1920/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Equipment & Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 100×50 equipment & hay barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Row-crop farmers use the 100×50 as a combined equipment shed and hay barn. The 40-foot clear.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$92,150$105,050Save $12,900
or as low as $1920/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$92,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gables
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 equipment & hay barn.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 100×50 equipment & hay barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Equipment & Hay Barn layout.

Looking for a 100×50 equipment & hay barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Row-crop farmers use the 100×50 as a combined equipment shed and hay barn. The 40-foot clear span swallows a combine with the header on, while 100 feet of length holds roughly 400 round bales stacked two high. Open-end or partial-wall configs let tractors drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Hay Barn works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1920/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1920/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×50 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $92,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1920/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1920/month on a 100×50 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

100×50 Equipment & Hay Barn

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bronze metal building farmhouse with timber porch posts and attached garage at evening

100×50 Barndominium

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Barndominium | Steel and Stud, From $91,500

12

100×50 Barndominium
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,300$91,500SAVE $12,800
or $1906/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Barndominium

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Barndominium, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 100×50 barndominium packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Barndo buyers split the 100×50 into 2,5000 sq ft of living space on one end and a 2,5000 sq ft.

You’re viewing:Barndominium·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,500$104,300Save $12,800
or as low as $1906/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$91,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-BARNDOMINIUMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 barndominium.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 100×50 barndominium packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft ADU

Barndominium layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 100×50 barndominium packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Barndo buyers split the 100×50 into 2,5000 sq ft of living space on one end and a 2,5000 sq ft shop on the other. A 12-foot wall height leaves room for vaulted ceilings above the kitchen and a loft over the bedrooms. Fully insulated, the barndominium lives like a custom home. See the sample floor plans below for two proven layout variants.

💡 Pro tip:Barndominium works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Barndominium in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium
Everyday barndominium
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium + seasonal storage
barndominium + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Barndominium, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1906/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 barndominium is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1906/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Barndominium buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Barndominium

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 barndominium cost?

A 100×50 barndominium from Steel and Stud starts at $91,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1906/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 barndominium price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 barndominium?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 barndominium need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 barndominium delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 barndominium without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1906/month on a 100×50 barndominium.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 barndominium?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 barndominium in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×50 barndominium add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×50 barndominium typically adds $40,000–$60,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bronze metal building farmhouse with timber porch posts and attached garage at evening

100×50 Barndominium

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with large open bay showing workbenches, tool chests, and an American flag

100×50 Fabrication Shop

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $93,750

12

100×50 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,850$93,750SAVE $13,100
or $1953/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×50 fabrication shop fits 100-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Welders, machinists, and metal fabricators choose this size for the crane.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,750$106,850Save $13,100
or as low as $1953/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×40
smaller
$75,450
100×50
this size
$93,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready
  • Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 fabrication shop.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 100×50 fabrication shop fits 100-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Fabrication Shop layout.

Our 100×50 fabrication shop fits 100-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Welders, machinists, and metal fabricators choose this size for the crane clearance. A 16-18 foot leg height supports a 5-ton bridge crane running the full 100-foot length, with work cells spaced every 20 feet. Two walk doors and a 100×50 roll-up keep material flow separate from foot traffic.

💡 Pro tip:Fabrication Shop works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1953/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1953/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 fabrication shop cost?

A 100×50 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $93,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1953/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1953/month on a 100×50 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×50 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with large open bay showing workbenches, tool chests, and an American flag

100×50 Fabrication Shop

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×50 Horse Riding Arena

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Horse Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $92,150

12

100×50 Horse Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$105,050$92,150SAVE $12,900
or $1920/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Horse Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Horse Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×50 horse riding arena packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. The 100×50 is the entry-size covered riding arena, long enough for dressage patterns and wide enough for.

You’re viewing:Horse Riding Arena·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$92,150$105,050Save $12,900
or as low as $1920/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$92,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear-Span
  • Skylight Panels
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-HORSE-RIDING-AREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 horse riding arena.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×50 horse riding arena packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Horse Riding Arena layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 100×50 horse riding arena packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. The 100×50 is the entry-size covered riding arena, long enough for dressage patterns and wide enough for barrel turns. Clear-span trusses eliminate interior posts so horses and riders have a clean working surface. Add kickboards along the base walls and skylights for daylight without glare.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Riding Arena works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Horse Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday horse riding arena
Everyday horse riding arena
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse riding arena + seasonal storage
horse riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Horse Riding Arena, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1920/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 horse riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1920/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Horse Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Horse Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 horse riding arena cost?

A 100×50 horse riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $92,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1920/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 horse riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 horse riding arena?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 horse riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 horse riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 horse riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1920/month on a 100×50 horse riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 horse riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 horse riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 horse riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×50 Horse Riding Arena

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building with red roof and four glass roll-up doors at a steel auto shop

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $93,350

12

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,400$93,350SAVE $13,050
or $1945/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Auto Body & Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of code-compliant auto body & repair shop space. Independent body shops fit four to six lifts, a paint booth, and a parts office into a 100×50 with a 14-foot ceiling. The length allows a.

You’re viewing:Auto Body & Repair Shop·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,350$106,400Save $13,050
or as low as $1945/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Insulated Walls
  • Multiple Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-AUTO-BODY-REPAIRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 auto body & repair shop.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. 100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of code-compliant auto body & repair shop space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Auto Body & Repair Shop layout.

100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of code-compliant auto body & repair shop space. Independent body shops fit four to six lifts, a paint booth, and a parts office into a 100×50 with a 14-foot ceiling. The length allows a drive-through layout where cars enter one short wall and exit the other. Insulated walls and a sealed slab meet most municipal paint-booth codes.

💡 Pro tip:Auto Body & Repair Shop works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Body & Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Body & Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Body & Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto body & repair shop
Everyday auto body & repair shop
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body & repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto body & repair shop + seasonal storage
auto body & repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1945/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 auto body & repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1945/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Body & Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Body & Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Body & Repair Shop also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Body & Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 auto body & repair shop cost?

A 100×50 auto body & repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $93,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1945/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 auto body & repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto body & repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 auto body & repair shop?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto body & repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 auto body & repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 auto body & repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 auto body & repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1945/month on a 100×50 auto body & repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 auto body & repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 auto body & repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×50 auto body & repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Body & Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building with red roof and four glass roll-up doors at a steel auto shop

100×50 Auto Body & Repair Shop

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan rv metal cover building with open bays storing a fifth-wheel camper and bowrider boat

100×50 RV & Boat Storage

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $91,500

12

100×50 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,300$91,500SAVE $12,800
or $1906/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50RV & Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 100×50 rv & boat storage packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×50 for enclosed RV and boat bays. At 16-20 foot eave.

You’re viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,500$104,300Save $12,800
or as low as $1906/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$91,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 rv & boat storage.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 100×50 rv & boat storage packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

RV BAYDaily Driver100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft · tall walls

RV & Boat Storage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 100×50 rv & boat storage packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×50 for enclosed RV and boat bays. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll in cleanly. Ten 12-foot-wide bays down the long wall, or five 20-foot pull-throughs, both pencil out at standard market rents.

💡 Pro tip:RV & Boat Storage works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 RV & Boat Storage, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1906/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1906/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 rv & boat storage cost?

A 100×50 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $91,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1906/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 rv & boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1906/month on a 100×50 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×50 rv & boat storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan rv metal cover building with open bays storing a fifth-wheel camper and bowrider boat

100×50 RV & Boat Storage

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel structure self storage building with row of orange roll-up unit doors

100×50 Self-Storage Facility

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $93,350

12

100×50 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,400$93,350SAVE $13,050
or $1945/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 100×50 self-storage facility packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-storage developers divide the 100×50 into roughly 30-40.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,350$106,400Save $13,050
or as low as $1945/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Partition-Ready
  • Climate Controlled
  • Multiple Walk Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 100×50 self-storage facility packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 100×50 self-storage facility packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Self-storage developers divide the 100×50 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×50 to 100×50. Interior partitions drop in after the shell is complete. A 10-foot ceiling keeps HVAC loads manageable while leaving headroom for standard unit heights.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1945/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1945/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×50 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $93,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1945/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1945/month on a 100×50 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×50 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel structure self storage building with row of orange roll-up unit doors

100×50 Self-Storage Facility

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building church with white cross on the gable and vertical metal panels

100×50 Church & Event Hall

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Church & Event Hall | Steel and Stud, From $93,450

12

100×50 Church & Event Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,550$93,450SAVE $13,100
or $1947/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Church & Event Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Church & Event Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of public-use church & event hall space. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×50 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined. 4,5000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200.

You’re viewing:Church & Event Hall·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,450$106,550Save $13,100
or as low as $1947/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Clear-Span
  • Framed Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-CHURCH-EVENT-HALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 church & event hall.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. 100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of public-use church & event hall space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Church & Event Hall layout.

100×50 delivers 5000 sq ft of public-use church & event hall space. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×50 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined. 4,5000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200 banquet-style. Clear-span means no columns blocking sightlines. Higher 4:12 pitch upgrade gives the interior the traditional chapel feel.

💡 Pro tip:Church & Event Hall works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Church & Event Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church & Event Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church & Event Hall spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church & Event Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday church & event hall
Everyday church & event hall
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church & event hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch & event hall + seasonal storage
church & event hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Church & Event Hall, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1947/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 church & event hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1947/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church & Event Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Church & Event Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Church & Event Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church & Event Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church & Event Hall also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church & Event Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 church & event hall cost?

A 100×50 church & event hall from Steel and Stud starts at $93,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1947/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 church & event hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church & event hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 church & event hall?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church & event hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 church & event hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 church & event hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 church & event hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1947/month on a 100×50 church & event hall.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 church & event hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 church & event hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 church & event hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church & Event Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building church with white cross on the gable and vertical metal panels

100×50 Church & Event Hall

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

100×50 Livestock Barn

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Livestock Barn | Steel and Stud, From $92,150

12

100×50 Livestock Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$105,050$92,150SAVE $12,900
or $1920/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Livestock Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Livestock Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 100×50 livestock barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×50 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by.

You’re viewing:Livestock Barn·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$92,150$105,050Save $12,900
or as low as $1920/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$92,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Ridge Vent
  • Open Gables
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-LIVESTOCK-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 100×50 livestock barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft

Livestock Barn layout.

Looking for a 100×50 livestock barn? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×50 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by 14-foot bedding areas on each side. 40 feet of width fits roughly 40-50 head of beef cattle in a loose-housing setup. Open gables and ridge vents keep airflow moving year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock Barn works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Livestock Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock barn
Everyday livestock barn
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock barn + seasonal storage
livestock barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Livestock Barn, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1920/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 livestock barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1920/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Livestock Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Livestock Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 livestock barn cost?

A 100×50 livestock barn from Steel and Stud starts at $92,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1920/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 livestock barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 livestock barn?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 livestock barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 livestock barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 livestock barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1920/month on a 100×50 livestock barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 livestock barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 livestock barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 livestock barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with timber framing beside a country pond

100×50 Livestock Barn

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$92,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building interior basketball court with wood floor, wall pads, and players shooting

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud, From $91,500

12

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,300$91,500SAVE $12,800
or $1906/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Indoor Sports Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 100×50 indoor sports facility? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,500$104,300Save $12,800
or as low as $1906/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$91,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • Clear-Span
  • Insulated Package
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 indoor sports facility.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 100×50 indoor sports facility? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 50′ · 5,000 ground + loft

Indoor Sports Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×50 indoor sports facility? At 5000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×50. The 100-foot length accommodates three batting cages end-to-end. 16-20 foot ceilings clear fly balls and allow mounted lighting grids.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Sports Facility works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1906/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1906/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🏭 100×50

Cold Storage Building

100×50 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×50 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $91,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1906/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 indoor sports facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1906/month on a 100×50 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×50 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building interior basketball court with wood floor, wall pads, and players shooting

100×50 Indoor Sports Facility

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×50 Cold Storage Building

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $93,750

12

100×50 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,850$93,750SAVE $13,100
or $1953/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×50 as.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,750$106,850Save $13,100
or as low as $1953/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Ready
  • Framed Dock Openings
  • Heavy Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 cold storage building.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×50 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels. 4,5000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F. Framed openings pre-installed for dock levelers on the short wall.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Building works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1953/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1953/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 cold storage building cost?

A 100×50 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $93,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1953/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 cold storage building?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1953/month on a 100×50 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×50 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×50 Cold Storage Building

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×80 Distribution Center

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Distribution Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside. Pallet racking runs.

You’re viewing:Distribution Center·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Red Iron
  • Vertical Roof
  • 4x 14×14 Dock Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 distribution center.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Distribution Center layout.

Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside. Pallet racking runs four deep down the long axis with a 12-ft cross aisle to spare.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Center works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Distribution Center, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 distribution center cost?

A 100×80 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 distribution center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 distribution center?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×80 Distribution Center

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building distribution facility at sunset with semi trailers docked and pallets staged

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Warehouse Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. At 9,8000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on.

You’re viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 warehouse steel building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Warehouse Steel Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. At 9,8000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out. Insulated panels keep humidity-sensitive stock stable year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Warehouse Steel Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×80 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 warehouse steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building distribution facility at sunset with semi trailers docked and pallets staged

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×80 Manufacturing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around. 20-ft eaves clear overhead bridge cranes up.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Framing
  • 26 GA Panels
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 manufacturing facility.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Facility layout.

Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around. 20-ft eaves clear overhead bridge cranes up to 5 tons when you order reinforced columns from the start.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Facility works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×80 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×80 Manufacturing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×80 Commercial Workshop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other. Four walk-in doors, three 100×80 roll-ups, and a row of 100×80.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 6-Bay Layout
  • 3x Roll-Ups
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other. Four walk-in doors, three 100×80 roll-ups, and a row of 100×80 windows feed natural light to every station.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×80 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×80 Commercial Workshop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×80 Aircraft Hangar

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance. A 70-ft hydraulic one-piece door on the 100-ft wall clears a.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20′ Eave Height
  • Hydraulic Door Ready
  • Red Iron Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 80′ · 8,000 ground + loft

Aircraft Hangar layout.

Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance. A 70-ft hydraulic one-piece door on the 100-ft wall clears a 14-ft tail without jacking the eave past 20 ft.

💡 Pro tip:Aircraft Hangar works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×80 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×80 Aircraft Hangar

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with black gable roof covering pickups, a boat and red tractor

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building | Steel and Stud, From $147,100

12

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Agricultural Metal Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×80 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Metal Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open-Side Option
  • 800 Bale Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-AGRICULTURAL-METBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 agricultural metal building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Agricultural Metal Building layout.

Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×80 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,8000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a sprayer with maintenance access. Open-side or partially enclosed configurations dominate this use.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Metal Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Metal Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Metal Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Metal Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural metal building
Everyday agricultural metal building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural metal building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural metal building + seasonal storage
agricultural metal building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 agricultural metal building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Metal Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Metal Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Metal Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Metal Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 agricultural metal building cost?

A 100×80 agricultural metal building from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 agricultural metal building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural metal building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 agricultural metal building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural metal building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 agricultural metal building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 agricultural metal building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 agricultural metal building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 100×80 agricultural metal building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 agricultural metal building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 agricultural metal building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 agricultural metal building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Metal Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with black gable roof covering pickups, a boat and red tractor

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×80 Cold Storage Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×80 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 cold storage building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Building layout.

Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×80 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,8000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 cold storage building cost?

A 100×80 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 cold storage building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×80 Cold Storage Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×80 Riding Arena

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $147,100

12

100×80 Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full.

You’re viewing:Riding Arena·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Eave Height
  • 2x Sliding Barn Doors
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-RIDING-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 riding arena.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Riding Arena layout.

Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full figure-eight, and 16-ft eaves keep dust-down sprinklers out of a rider’s hat.

💡 Pro tip:Riding Arena works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday riding arena
Everyday riding arena
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWriding arena + seasonal storage
riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Riding Arena, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 riding arena cost?

A 100×80 riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 riding arena?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 100×80 riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×80 Riding Arena

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with white sectional door and covered porch workbench in mountain pines

100×80 Fabrication Shop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and fabricators run the 100×80 industrial steel building as a heavy fab shop with two.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 fabrication shop.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Fabrication Shop layout.

Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and fabricators run the 100×80 industrial steel building as a heavy fab shop with two pull-through bays for trailer-length work. Reinforced roof framing supports a 5-ton bridge crane, and 18-foot eaves clear most rolled stock racks. Concrete slab spec runs 6 inches with rebar at this load class.

💡 Pro tip:Fabrication Shop works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 100×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with white sectional door and covered porch workbench in mountain pines

100×80 Fabrication Shop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×80 Self-Storage Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×80 metal building as a single-story.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×80 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×80 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×80 Self-Storage Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Truck and Fleet Maintenance

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space. Fleet operators spec a 100×80 with three 100×80 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits.

You’re viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. 100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Truck and Fleet Maintenance layout.

100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space. Fleet operators spec a 100×80 with three 100×80 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Truck and Fleet Maintenance works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart